Three-step Challenge Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/Trading Programs/three-step-challenge/ We provide reviews, ratings, and the latest news for Proprietary Trading Firms. Thu, 17 Apr 2025 09:47:24 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.1 https://forexpropreviews.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/cropped-Icon-1-32x32.png Three-step Challenge Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/Trading Programs/three-step-challenge/ 32 32 E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=e8-markets https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/#comments Thu, 01 Sep 2022 20:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=3000 E8 Markets promotes the success of its traders in their professional journeys. The primary expectation from clients is that they exhibit discipline, effectively manage risk, and prioritize long-term consistency. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This […]

The post E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

E8 Markets promotes the success of its traders in their professional journeys. The primary expectation from clients is that they exhibit discipline, effectively manage risk, and prioritize long-term consistency. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are E8 Markets?

E8 Markets is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name E8 Funding LLC that was incorporated on the 5th of November, 2021. They are located in Dallas, Texas, as well as in Prague in the Czech Republic, and are being managed by CEO Dylan Elchami. E8 Markets provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations, as well as an opportunity to customize their two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs while being partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

E8 Markets’ headquarters are located at 100 Crescent Ct, Unit 700, Dallas, TX 75201, United States.

Who is the CEO of E8 Markets?

Dylan Elchami, the visionary behind E8 Markets, aimed to establish a distinctive and accessible avenue for individuals to evolve into professionally funded traders, overseeing capital from any location worldwide. He not only achieved this objective but also remains dedicated to enhancing E8 Markets’ services and terms, consistently drawing in more traders to join his exclusive trading firm.

At the forefront of his industry priorities is his commitment to simplifying the trading journey for individuals by fostering strategic partnerships and delivering cutting-edge software solutions. To ensure traders enjoy the optimal experience, he maintains in-house engineers who work diligently to provide the best possible support at all times.

Anyone interested in following Dylan Elchami can do so by following his LinkedIn.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

E8 Markets provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • E8 Classic
  • E8 Track
  • E8 Track 1:1
  • E8 One
  • E8 Pro

E8 Classic

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The E8 Classic allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$110
$25,000$228
$50,000$338
$100,000$588

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Classic Scaling Plan

The E8 Classic also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 Classic Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 8%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during both evaluation phases)

E8 Track

E8 Markets’ E8 Track provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The E8 Track allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$138
$50,000$208
$100,000$358
$200,000$598
$400,000$1,188

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Track Scaling Plan

The E8 Track also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $200,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($20,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $220,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $16,000 (80% profit split of the $20,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $20,000 on your $200,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $220,000.

E8 Track Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 8%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during all three evaluation phases)

E8 Track 1:1

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The E8 Track 1:1 allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$138
$50,000$208
$100,000$358
$200,000$598
$400,000$1,188

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Track 1:1 Scaling Plan

The E8 Track 1:1 also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $200,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($20,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $220,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $16,000 (80% profit split of the $20,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $20,000 on your $200,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $220,000.

E8 Track 1:1 Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during all three evaluation phases)

E8 One

E8 Markets E8 One provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The E8 One allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$48
$10,000$88
$25,000$188
$50,000$288
$100,000$488
$200,000$798
$400,000$1,598

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

E8 One Scaling Plan

The E8 One also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 One Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during the evaluation phase)

E8 Pro

E8 Markets E8 Pro provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The E8 Pro allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$118
$50,000$228
$100,000$398
$200,000$798

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 2% daily pause or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules. Additionally, you also have a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

E8 Pro Scaling Plan

The E8 Pro also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 Pro Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 8%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. All account sizes have a daily pause of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during the evaluation phase)

Customizable Evaluation Options

Trading ObjectivesObjective Values
Account Size (E8 Classic)$5,000; $10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000
Account Size (E8 Track & E8 Track 1:1)$10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000; $105,000; $110,000; $115,000; $120,000; $125,000; $130,000; $135,000; $140,000; $145,000; $150,000; $155,000; $160,000; $165,000; $170,000; $175,000; $180,000; $185,000; $190,000; $195,000; $200,000; $205,000; $210,000; $215,000; $220,000; $225,000; $230,000; $235,000; $240,000; $245,000; $250,000; $255,000; $260,000; $265,000; $270,000; $275,000; $280,000; $285,000; $290,000; $295,000; $300,000; $305,000; $310,000; $315,000; $320,000; $325,000; $330,000; $335,000; $340,000; $345,000; $350,000; $355,000; $360,000; $365,000; $370,000; $375,000; $380,000; $385,000; $390,000; $395,000; $400,000
Account Size (E8 One)$5,000; $10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000; $105,000; $110,000; $115,000; $120,000; $125,000; $130,000; $135,000; $140,000; $145,000; $150,000; $155,000; $160,000; $165,000; $170,000; $175,000; $180,000; $185,000; $190,000; $195,000; $200,000; $205,000; $210,000; $215,000; $220,000; $225,000; $230,000; $235,000; $240,000; $245,000; $250,000; $255,000; $260,000; $265,000; $270,000; $275,000; $280,000; $285,000; $290,000; $295,000; $300,000; $305,000; $310,000; $315,000; $320,000; $325,000; $330,000; $335,000; $340,000; $345,000; $350,000; $355,000; $360,000; $365,000; $370,000; $375,000; $380,000; $385,000; $390,000; $395,000; $400,000
Maximum Daily Loss3%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, 5%, 5.5%, 6%, 6.5%, 7%
Maximum Loss6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%
Maximum Trailing Loss (E8 One)6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%
Maximum Daily & Maximum Loss (E8 Track 1:1)3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%
Profit Split40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%
Funding Program Price RangeE8 Classic: $37 up to $1,167
E8 Track: $37 up to $2,357
E8 Track 1:1: $37 up to $1,916
E8 One: $33 up to $3,567

What Makes E8 Markets Different From Other Prop Firms?

E8 Markets differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs.

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. The E8 Classic also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Classic stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, and an opportunity to customize your two-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

E8 Markets’ E8 Track is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phases two and three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The E8 Track also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Track stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, affordable evaluation fees, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10% (Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)8%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The E8 Track 1:1 also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Track 1:1 stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, affordable evaluation fees, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)5%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)6% (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

E8 Markets’ E8 One is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The E8 One also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 One stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status, on-demand future withdrawals, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunding Pips
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%85%

E8 Markets’ E8 Pro is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8%, with a 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. The E8 Pro also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Pro stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days, and weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target8%12%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)3%
Maximum Loss8%6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)4%
Maximum Loss8%6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFTUK
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, E8 Markets differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs.

Is Getting E8 Markets Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the E8 Classic is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Track is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (8% in phase one, and 4% in phase two and phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Track 1:1 is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase 3) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 One is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Pro is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit target of 8% coupled with average maximum loss rules (2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 4 calendar days since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, E8 Markets is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

E8 Markets is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 Classic, E8 Track, or E8 Track 1:1, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 8 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 One, you will be eligible to receive your payout on day one if you manage to generate a profit. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded E8 One.

And lastly, while working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 Pro, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to E8 Markets payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for E8 Markets is their Telegram channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of their most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does E8 Markets Use?

E8 Markets is partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their brokers.

Virtual Markets is a company that goes beyond being a traditional brokerage. They position themselves as a dedicated ally within the dynamic realm of trading, exclusively catering to corporate clients. Virtual Markets offer a wide range of tradable instruments, which include indices, currency pairs, commodities, and crypto while providing access to the popular MetaTrader 5, cTrader, MatchTrader and TradeLocker trading platform.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with E8 Markets, they allow you to trade on cTrader, Match-Trader or Tradelocker if you choose a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions and on MetaTrader 5 if you choose Virtual Markets.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, E8 Markets is partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:50, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
AUD/ZARCAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/HUFCHF/JPYCHF/ZAR
EUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZKEUR/GBPEUR/HUF
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/RUB
EUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/USDEUR/ZARGBP/AUDGBP/CAD
GBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDGBP/ZAR
NOK/SEKNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SEKNZD/SGD
NZD/USDSGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HKD
USD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLN
USD/RUBUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD
BRENTWTINGAS

Indices

AUS200F40GE30US30UK100
HK50JP225US100US500STOXX50

Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 3 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 3 USD / LOT
INDICES 3 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 3 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here
cTraderClick here
MetaTrader 5Click here

Education

E8 Markets provides its community with a detailed E8 Blog with educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • About E8 – Educational articles about their features
  • Announcements – Latest news and updates
  • E8 Traders – E8 Trader interviews
  • Instruments – Educational articles about trading instruments
  • Market Research – Educational market overview articles
  • Trading Tips – Educational articles about trading suggestions, guides, and essential aspects of trading

E8 Markets distinguishes itself as a select proprietary trading firm offering a free trial option. This allows traders to experience and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, thereby mitigating the likelihood of errors when they ultimately opt for one of the two available evaluation programs.

Finally, E8 Markets offers a professionally designed trader dashboard accessible to all clients. This feature simplifies risk management by providing continuous access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates every minute of the day, thereby enhancing the overall user experience.

E8 Markets Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

E8 Markets has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, E8 Markets has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,653 reviews. Notably, 85% of these reviews have awarded E8 Markets the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the E8 Markets community member expresses heartfelt appreciation for the company’s professionalism, prompt support, and enthusiastic assistance. The acknowledgment extends to E8 Markets’ commendable reputation for timely profit disbursements and swift resolution of payment method issues, particularly in the aftermath of the past Deel incident.

E8 Markets is an excellent proprietary trading firm, with the commenter expressing satisfaction after receiving their initial payout and refund seamlessly without encountering any issues. The trader particularly appreciates the clean and professional appearance of the website and trading dashboard, highlighting their positive experience with the platform’s overall design. Furthermore, the effectiveness of the payment system is also praised, contributing to an overall outstanding experience with E8 Markets.

Social Media Statistics

E8 Markets can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter28,086 Followers
Instagram52,200 Followers
YouTube3,880 Subscribers
Telegram4,656 Members
Discord52,817 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@e8markets.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
Help CenterHelp Center Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with E8 Markets by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the E8X Dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, trading platform, account size, and trading conditions.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 5% discount on all funding program types. Please note that E8 Track has no available discounts.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and cryptocurrency payment method after you have successfully applied our discount code.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from E8 Markets, which will redirect you to the E8X Dashboard, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, E8 Markets is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the E8 Classic, which is a two-step evaluation, the E8 Track and E8 Track 1.1, which are three-step evaluations, and the E8 One and E8 Pro, which are one-step evaluations.

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Classic features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Track is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, and 4% in phase two and phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Track features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Track 1:1 features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 One is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 One features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Pro is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Pro features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend E8 Markets to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs. After considering everything E8 Markets has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of E8 Markets was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:08 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on E8 Markets and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed E8 Markets review by commenting below!

The post E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/feed/ 35
FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fxify https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 19:30:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=44437 FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. […]

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FXIFY?

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name FXIFY Solutions Limited that was incorporated in May 2023. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by co-founders David Bhidey and Peter Brown. FXIFY provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXIFY’s headquarters are located at Unit 1, 74 Back Church Lane, London, E1 1LX.

Who is the CEO of FXIFY?

David Bhidey and Peter Brown are co-founders of FXIFY.

David Bhidey, a co-founder of FXIFY, has a decade-long career in technology and e-commerce, initially founding an online property company. His passion for technology and finance led him to transition into trading five years ago, joining FXPIG as an Introducing Broker alongside Peter Brown. Together, they navigated the financial markets successfully.

In the past four years, David has honed his proprietary trading skills and, along with Peter, established a leading proprietary trading firm to fill a market gap. Leveraging his background, David aims to make FXIFY a trader-centric success story, prioritizing profitability and integrity. His strategic vision guides the company, ensuring it remains innovative and excellent in the financial markets.

Peter Brown, the second co-founder of FXIFY, brings over a decade of e-commerce and marketing expertise. His digital journey spans agencies, self-establishment, and leadership in performance marketing and website development. Transitioning into personal trading five years ago, Peter partnered with David Bhidey as an Introducing Broker for FXPIG.

Their collaboration led to the creation of FXIFY, addressing an unmet market need. Under Peter’s guidance, FXIFY swiftly rose to prominence as a premier proprietary trading firm. Leading development and performance marketing, Peter leverages his e-commerce and finance background to drive FXIFY’s ongoing success.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FXIFY provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Two-phase Evaluation
  • One-phase Evaluation
  • Lightning Evaluation
  • Three-phase Evaluation
  • Instant Funding

Two-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Two-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Two-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

One-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The One-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Lightning Evaluation

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The Lightning Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$119
$50,000$209
$100,000$399

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum trailing loss rules  and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have no minimum trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 4% maximum trailing loss rules and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. Your first payout on your funded account is after 7 days with no minimum amount and 3 minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be % 70 up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation

  1. 90% Profit Split
  2. No Stop Loss

Lightning Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Lightning Evaluation does not has a scaling plan.

Lightning Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trading Days
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.
  • Stop-Loss Requirement – A stop-loss is compulsory to manage risk and protect your trades. The first and second trades executed without a stop-loss will automatically close (soft breach). The third trade without a stop-loss is considered a hard breach.

Three-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$59
$15,000$79
$25,000$149
$50,000$249
$100,000$399
$200,000$799
$400,000$1,599

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Three-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Three-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Three-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Instant Funding

FXIFY’s Instant Funding provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$69
$2,500$119
$5,000$229
$10,000$449
$25,000$899
$50,000$1749

By purchasing Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirement. You must only respect the 8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements and no minimum trading day requirements. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis with an 80% up to 90% profit split.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Instant Funding

  1. 90% Profit Split

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding does not feature a scaling plan.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 8%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%. Trailing loss locks as it reaches the initial account balance.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes FXIFY Different From Other Prop Firms?

FXIFY differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%85%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5%, with a 3% maximum daily 4% maximum trailing loss rules and met 30% consistency rule. You also have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have 3 minimum trading days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after 7 days, holding over weekend and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYHola Prime
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%65% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (One-step Stellar)
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY &  FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunderPro
Profit Target5%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during each evaluation phase. The Three-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is no minimum withdrawal requirement, with a 8% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Keep in mind that Instant Funding doesn’t have a scaling plan. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, and bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe5%ers (Hyper Growth)
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Tradexprop

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYTradexprop
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss8%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)80% (90% with Add-on)

In conclusion, FXIFY differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Is Getting FXIFY Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Lightning Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 5% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are 7 maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 90% while meeting the consistency score.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its no initial profit target coupled with above-average maximum loss rule (8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating profits, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%, up to 90%, if they choose the add-on during the purchase.

After considering all the factors, FXIFY is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in May 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Two-phase Evaluation, One-phase Evaluation, or Three-phase Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on demand. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 30 calendar days (14 calendar days with add-on). Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Lightning Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 70% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account while meeting the consistency score..

When it comes to FXIFY payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FXIFY is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FXIFY Use?

FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXPIG broker is a reliable and transparent platform for traders seeking a robust trading experience. Focusing on providing fair and competitive trading conditions, it offers tight spreads, fast execution, and a wide range of trading instruments. Its dedication to transparency and client satisfaction makes FXPIG a top choice for traders of all experience levels.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FXIFY, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30 (1:50 with add-on), depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NZDEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUD
GBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNH
USD/CZKUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPY
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/EURXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD
UKOilUSOilNGAS

Indices

AUS200CHN50UDE30DJ30ES35
F40HKG50JPN225RUS2000STOXX50
UK100US500US500USTECVIX

Stocks

AALAAPLABNBAMZNBABA
COINCSCODISEBAYFB
FGOOGHDINTCJPM
MRNAMSFTNFLXNKEORCL
PTONPYPLQCOMSBUXTSLA
UBERWMTXOM

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USDBTC/USDTETH/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
COMMODITIES6 USD / LOT (Only Metals)(All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
STOCKSRaw & All-in / 0.3% on Stock CFDs
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 4 (All In)FXPIG-Demo621238u6hdvDaClick here
MetaTrader 4 (Raw)FXPIG-DEMO625908f7YdUlyClick here
MetaTrader 5 (All In)FXPIG-Server2100170634M@R7PcKdClick here
MetaTrader 5 (Raw)FXPIG-Server2100139002wxgb2tswClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

FXIFY doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

Nevertheless, FXIFY provides all its clients with entry to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, which enhances risk management through continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives. This guarantees immediate updates, thereby enhancing user satisfaction.

Trustpilot Feedback

FXIFY has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FXIFY has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 3,014 reviews. Notably, 77% of these reviews have awarded FXIFY the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows the client expressing satisfaction with the excellent proprietary trading experience and prompt payouts. Overall, they found the process to be smooth and commendable. However, they noted a minor delay in activating the funded account, which was attributed to FXIFY’s implementation of online contracts over emails. While this transition caused a slight delay initially, the client acknowledged its potential for expediting future processes. Despite this hiccup, FXIFY secured a position among the client’s top three preferred firms.

The commenter highlighted and described FXIFY’s services as a great experience, praising the company for its excellent rules and policies. They went on to label FXIFY as the most pleasant proprietary trading firm they’ve encountered. The client appreciated feeling supported in maintaining focus on their work as a trader, expressing a sense of peace within the company.

Social Media Statistics

FXIFY can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook56,000 Followers & 15,000 Likes
Twitter28,400 Followers
Discord39,315 members
Instagram68,900 Followers
Telegram6,405 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fxify.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FXIFY by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, price feed type, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all FXIFY account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FXIFY is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Two-phase Evaluation, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-phase Evaluation and Lightning Evaluation, which is a one-step evaluation, the Three-phase Evaluation, which is a three-step evaluation, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 50% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Additionally, traders must also meet the 30% consistency rule, ensuring stable and disciplined trading throughout the evaluation process. Regarding time limitations, you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation does not have a scaling plan.

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Three-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 8% maximum daily loss rule, and 8% maximum trailing loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. It’s essential to note that Instant Funding does not features a scaling plan.

I would recommend FXIFY to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts. After considering everything FXIFY has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FXIFY was last updated on 09.04.2025 at 12:10 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FXIFY and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FXIFY review by commenting below!

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/feed/ 0
The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-5ers https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 19:10:00 +0000 http://export3.mercury.is/?post_type=casino&p=138 The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial […]

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are The5ers?

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Five Percent Online Ltd that was incorporated in January 2016. They are located in Raanana, Israel, as well as in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO Saul Lokier. The5ers provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, while being partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

The5ers’ headquarters are located at 14 Haroshet St, Raanana, Israel.

Who is the CEO of The5ers?

Saul Lokier is the CEO of The5ers. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

The5ers provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • High Stakes
  • Hyper Growth
  • Bootcamp

High Stakes

The5ers’ High Stakes provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The High Stakes allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$78
$20,000$165
$60,000$329
$100,000$545

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

High Stakes Scaling Plan

High Stakes also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your High Stakes account.

High Stakes Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

Hyper Growth

The5ers’ Hyper Growth provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Hyper Growth allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$260
$10,000$450
$20,000$850

By purchasing Hyper Growth, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for stage 1. You must also respect the 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout is when you manage to hit your 10% profit target, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Hyper Growth Scaling Plan

Hyper Growth also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $40,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $80,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Hyper Growth account.

Hyper Growth Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for level one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. All account sizes have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.

Bootcamp

The5ers’ Bootcamp provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $100,000 up to $250,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can manage risk throughout the three-step period. The Bootcamp program allows you to trade with up to 1:10 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$100,000$95 ($205 Once Reaching Funded Status)
$250,000$225 ($350 Once Reaching Funded Status)

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bootcamp Scaling Plan

The Bootcamp program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 5% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 5%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 2%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 3.5%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 5.5%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 5% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 5% profit target on your Bootcamp account.

Bootcamp Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all three evaluation phases is 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. Only funded accounts have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%. (4% Once Funded)
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum stop-loss requirement of 2% for each position.

What Makes The5ers Different From Other Prop Firms?

The5ers differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

The5ers’ High Stakes is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. High Stakes also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, High Stakes stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary75% up to 90%

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 3% daily pause and a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Hyper Growth also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Hyper Growth stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, bi-weekly withdrawals after the initial 10% profit target, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between The5ers & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%50% up to 80%

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% with a 5% maximum loss rule during all three evaluation phases. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Bootcamp program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bootcamp program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, an affordable evaluation fee, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)4%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The5ers & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 90%

In conclusion, The5ers differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%.

Is Getting The5ers Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the High Stakes program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in each evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Hyper Growth program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bootcamp program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in each of the three evaluation phases) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum loss in evaluation phases, and 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss once funded). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, The5ers is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in January 2016. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with The5ers and reaching funded status with the High Stakes or Bootcamp programs, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Bootcamp account, while the High Stakes program will provide you with a generous profit split of 80% up to 100%.

However, while working with The5ers and purchasing the Hyper Growth program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to hit your 10% profit target. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Hyper Growth account.

When it comes to The5ers payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for The5ers is their YouTube channel, where you can find numerous interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of successful Trader Interviews can be seen below.

Which Broker Does The5ers Use?

The5ers doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with The5ers, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, The5ers is partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/USDGBP/USDUSD/JPYUSD/CADAUD/USDNZD/USD
USD/CHFAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXTI/USDXBR/USD

Indices

NAS100SP500UK100JPN225US30
DAX40

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 4 USD / LOT (XTI/USD & XBR/USD 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES 4 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5FivePercentOnline-Real2210229gdfsgdsf651Click here

Education

The5ers provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following five categories:

  • Advanced Forex Blog
  • Trader Interviews
  • Trading Room
  • Trading Psychology
  • Trading Strategy

Additionally, we can also find numerous other educational trading resources on their website, such as:

  • Asset Specifications – Updates
  • Trading Tools
  • Autochartist
  • Trading Ideas
  • Psychology Coaching
  • The5ers Classes
  • Videos
  • Forex Pivot Points
  • Trading Course
  • Tips to Succeed in The5ers Funded Trader Program
  • Economic Forex Calendar
  • Webinars & Live Events
  • Forex Scalping Workshop
  • Supply & Demand Workshop

Finally, The5ers provides all clients with access to a carefully designed trader dashboard. This feature improves risk management by offering continuous access to comprehensive statistics and goals, ensuring real-time updates throughout the day. This enhancement significantly contributes to an overall improved user experience.

The5ers Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

The5ers has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, The5ers have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.9 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 14,269 reviews. Notably, 93% of these reviews have awarded The5ers the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client appreciates The5ers as a longstanding company in the field, highlighting the delight in their longevity. They note the smallest spreads and smoother chart movements compared to other prop firms. The support from The5ers is commended as impeccable, with the commenter expressing confidence in reaching out for assistance and guidance and always receiving effective help.

In the second comment, the client praises The5ers for offering an opportunity for Forex traders to manage more substantial capital without risking their own funds. Despite a tight drawdown requirement, the commenter finds their profit-sharing model appealing, emphasizing the evident growth potential. They caution that, like all prop trading opportunities, it’s crucial to thoroughly comprehend the rules and conditions associated with The5ers.

Social Media Statistics

The5ers can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter57,500 Followers
Instagram85,400 Followers
YouTube56,800 Subscribers
TradingView5,700 Followers
Pinterest5,800 Followers
LinkedIn9,320 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailhelp@the5ers.com
Phone+1 (929) 955 5595
+44 (20) 8068 0793
Discord❌
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish, Arabic

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with The5ers through our affiliate link by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and payment currency.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from The5ers, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, The5ers is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the High Stakes, which is a two-step evaluation, the Hyper Growth, which is an instant funding program, and the Bootcamp, which is a three-step evaluation.

The5ers’ High Stakes is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that High Stakes features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for stage 1, with a 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Hyper Growth features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a 6% profit target in each of the three evaluation phases to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum loss rule to follow. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bootcamp features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend The5ers to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%. After considering everything The5ers has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of The5ers was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:45 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on The5ers and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed The5ers review by commenting below!

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/feed/ 16
Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=alpha-capital-group https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 05:50:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=14580 Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 […]

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive 80% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, and indices.

Who are Alpha Capital Group?

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Alpha Capital Group Limited that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO George Kohler. Alpha Capital Group provide traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation while developing their own ACG Markets brokerage.

Their headquarters are located at 10 Lower Thames Street, Billingsgate, London, England, EC3R 6AF.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Alpha Capital Group provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Alpha Pro Challenge
  • Alpha Swing Challenge
  • Alpha One-step Challenge
  • Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Pro Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Swing Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Swing Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$70
$10,000$147
$25,000$247
$50,000$357
$100,000$577
$200,000$1,097

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Swing Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Swing Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0001.25 Lots
$10,0002.5 Lots
$25,0005 Lots
$50,00010 Lots
$100,00020 Lots
$200,00040 Lots
$300,00060 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha One-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a minimum withdrawal requirement of 2%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$67
$25,000$157
$50,000$247
$100,000$397
$200,000$697

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Payouts on your funded account can be requested on-demand or bi-weekly, depending on the conditions met. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase one is 8%. The profit target for the Evaluation phase two and three is 4%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

What Makes Alpha Capital Group Different From Other Prop Firms?

Alpha Capital Group differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Swing Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupThe5%ers
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 80%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in all evaluation phase. The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Three-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, payout on-demand option, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%5%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Is Getting Alpha Capital Group Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Swing Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Three-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one, 4% phase two, and 4% in phase three) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, Alpha Capital Group is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation which both feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha Pro Challenge, Alpha Swing Challenge, or Alpha Three-step Challenge you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days or on-demand. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Alpha Capital Group payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Alpha Capital Group is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Alpha Capital Group Use?

Alpha Capital Group doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. Instead, they have developed their own ACG Markets broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Alpha Capital Group, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, cTrader, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Alpha Capital Group has developed ACG Markets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, and indices with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/HKDUSD/JPY
USD/SGD

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDUKOilUSOil

Indices

EUSTX50GER30HK50JPN225NAS100
UK100US30US500

Trading Fees

Trading commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX0 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES0 USD / LOT
INDICES0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5ACGMarkets-Live1189526ForexpropreviewsClick here
cTraderClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

Alpha Capital Group provides its community with a detailed Media section with educational content, such as the following three categories:

  • Market Preview
  • Weekly Recaps
  • Market Roundup

Additionally, we can also find two educational trading resources on their website:

They are also one of the few prop firms that have an option of a free trial before starting with the evaluation challenge so you can prepare yourself and reduce the chances of errors happening when you do decide to purchase the challenge.

Finally, Alpha Capital Group grants all clients access to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, simplifying risk management with continuous access to detailed statistics and objectives. This ensures real-time updates every minute, enhancing the overall user experience.

Alpha Capital Group Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Alpha Capital Group has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Alpha Capital Group have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.5 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 10,116 reviews. Notably, 83% of these reviews have awarded Alpha Capital Group the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that Alpha Capital Group is praised for offering one of the best trading conditions in the industry, featuring no commissions and minimal or no slippage. Regular and even substantial payouts are being processed, and the accessibility of prop owners, particularly through Discord, phone calls, and WhatsApp. The commenter emphasizes the unmatched transparency of Alpha Capital Group, expressing confidence as they haven’t encountered any unresolved issues.

Among several prop firms considered, Alpha Capital Group stands out as the best for this client. They highlight the benefits of low spreads and no commission, ensuring a higher retention of earned funds upon getting funded. The dashboard is praised for its rich data and analytics, aiding in trading decisions.

Social Media Statistics

Alpha Capital Group can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter63,000 Followers
YouTube25,200 Subscribers
Discord106,049 Members
Instagram70,000 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailinfo@alphacapitalgroup.uk
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Alpha Capital Group by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all Alpha Capital Group account sizes.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from Alpha Capital Group, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between Four funding programs: Alpha Pro Challenge and Alpha Swing Challenge, which are both two-step programs, Alpha One-step Challenge, which is a one-step program, and Alpha Three-step Challenge, which is a three-step program.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Swing Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is an industry-standard three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Three-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Alpha Capital Group to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts. After considering everything Alpha Capital Group has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Alpha Capital Group was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:18 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Alpha Capital Group and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Alpha Capital Group review by commenting below!

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/feed/ 3
RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=rebelsfunding https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/#respond Mon, 06 Jul 2020 14:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=39635 RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished […]

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are RebelsFunding?

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name RIFM, S.R.O., that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They are located in Bratislava, Slovak Republic, and are being managed by CEO Marek Soska. RebelsFunding provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

RebelsFunding headquarters are located at Landererova 8, Bratislava – Staré Mesto 811 09, Slovak Republic.

Who is the CEO of RebelsFunding?

Marek Soska is the CEO of RebelsFunding. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video review

Funding Program Options

RebelsFunding provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Copper Program
  • Bronze Program
  • Silver Program
  • Gold Program
  • Diamond Program

Copper Program

RebelsFunding Copper Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $320,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the four-step evaluation period. The Copper Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$28
$10,000$44
$20,000$77
$40,000$135
$80,000$259
$160,000$499
$320,000$939

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase four.

Evaluation phase four requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase four. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all four evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Copper Program Scaling Plan

The Copper Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 15% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Copper Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Copper Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the four evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 4 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Bronze Program

RebelsFunding Bronze Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $160,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Bronze Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$42
$10,000$64
$20,000$104
$40,000$179
$80,000$344
$160,000$669

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bronze Program Scaling Plan

The Bronze Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 15% over the three-month period or a 5% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Bronze Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Bronze Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the three evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Silver Program

RebelsFunding Silver Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Silver Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$35
$5,000$50
$10,000$80
$20,000$130
$40,000$230
$80,000$420

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Silver Program Scaling Plan

The Silver Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Silver Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Silver Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 6 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Gold Program

RebelsFunding Gold Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $40,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Gold Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$50
$5,000$70
$10,000$100
$20,000$160
$40,000$280

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Gold Program Scaling Plan

The Gold Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Gold Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Gold Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 8 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Diamond Program

RebelsFunding Diamond Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Diamond Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$50
$2,000$100
$5,000$190
$10,000$360
$20,000$690

By purchasing the Diamond Program, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must also respect the 6% maximum loss rule while being required to execute a minimum of five trades to qualify for a payout. Your first payout is once you manage to secure a 10% profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted once you manage to secure a minimum profit of 5% and upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Diamond Program Scaling Plan

The Diamon Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $20,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $32,000.

Diamond Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for phase one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes RebelsFunding Different From Other Prop Firms?

RebelsFunding differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Program prices.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete four phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the four evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. The Copper Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Copper Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the three evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. The Bronze Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bronze Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10%5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%50% up to 100%

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. The Silver Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Silver Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 90%

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in each evaluation phase. The Gold Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Gold Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 92.75%

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades during each payout cycle. The Diamond Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Diamond Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, no evaluation phases, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & OFP

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingOFP
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, RebelsFunding differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs.

Is Getting RebelsFunding Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Copper Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all four evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of four trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bronze Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all three evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Silver Program is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of six trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Gold Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of eight trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Diamond Program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with an average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.

After considering all the factors, RebelsFunding is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Copper, Bronze, Silver, or Gold Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Copper or Bronze Program, while the Silver and Gold Program will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 90%.

However, while working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Diamond Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to generate a 10% profit. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you manage to generate a minimum profit of 5% or upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Diamond Program.

When it comes to RebelsFunding payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for RebelsFunding is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does RebelsFunding Use?

RebelsFunding doesn’t trade with common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with RebelsFunding, they allow you to trade on RF-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, RebelsFunding is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZK
EUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLN
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
GBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HUFUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOK
USD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD1NGAS
1USO

Indices

USTECDE30DJ30F40JPN225
STOXX50UK100US500

Stocks

AAPLAMZNBACSCOFB
GOOGHPQIBMNFLXTSLA

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDTSOL/USDTBTC/USDTDOGE/USDT
ETH/USDTLTC/USDTNEO/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
COMMODITIES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
INDICES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
CRYPTO 2 USD per $100,000 Capital

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
RF-TraderguestROPreviews1Click here

Education

RebelsFunding provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as:

  • Educational Articles
  • Company Updates
  • Other Articles

RebelsFunding distinguishes itself as a unique proprietary trading company offering a complimentary trial option. This allows traders to acquaint themselves with and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, minimizing the likelihood of errors when they eventually opt for one of the five available evaluation programs.

Lastly, RebelsFunding grants all clients entry to a trader dashboard meticulously crafted by professionals. This functionality simplifies risk management by providing continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, guaranteeing real-time updates.

RebelsFunding Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

RebelsFunding has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotRebelsFunding has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,473 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded RebelsFunding the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us RebelsFunding being praised as one of the best prop firms, offering one of the best rates and lowest commissions in the industry. The client expresses admiration for the amazing customer support. They highlight the advantage of a 1:200 leverage, emphasizing its potential for earning significant profits. The client also shares their positive experience, currently holding a 10,000 Bronze Program with love for RebelsFunding.

RebelsFunding stands out as one of a few prop firms that provide open access and freedom for everyone to trade in the market. The client appreciates their affordable programs, emphasizing that any individual can participate. They praise the favorable conditions and supportive customer care, suggesting that even in the event of an account setback, it’s worth pursuing another account with RebelsFunding due to the bright future they envision.

Social Media Statistics

RebelsFunding can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook9,400 Followers & 5,800 Likes
Twitter5,864 Followers
Instagram11,300 Followers
YouTube1,730 Subscribers
TikTok617 Followers & 746 Likes
Telegram1,754 Members
Discord15,727 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@rebelsfunding.com
Phone+421 911 611 250
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Czech, Portuguese, Slovak, Swahili, Thai, Vietnamese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with RebelsFunding by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, cryptocurrency, and bank wire transfer payment methods.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all RebelsFunding account types.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from RebelsFunding, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, RebelsFunding is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Copper Program, which is a four-step evaluation, the Bronze Program, which is a three-step evaluation, the Silver Program, which is a two-step evaluation, the Gold Program, which is a one-step evaluation, and the Diamond Program, which is an instant funding program.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires the completion of four phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all four evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Copper Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bronze Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Silver Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Gold Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 75% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase one, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades within each payout cycle. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Diamond Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend RebelsFunding to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs. After considering everything RebelsFunding offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of RebelsFunding was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:37 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on RebelsFunding and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed RebelsFunding review by commenting below!

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/feed/ 0
Fintokei Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fintokei/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fintokei https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fintokei/#respond Mon, 22 Jun 2020 10:30:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=58026 Fintokei is a proprietary trading firm that provides a secure environment for traders to sharpen their skills, develop healthy habits, and build discipline, all aimed at outperforming the market and establishing a verified track record. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to €400,000 and receive […]

The post Fintokei Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Fintokei is a proprietary trading firm that provides a secure environment for traders to sharpen their skills, develop healthy habits, and build discipline, all aimed at outperforming the market and establishing a verified track record. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to €400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, and indices.

Who are Fintokei?

Fintokei is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Fintokei a.s., that was incorporated in April 2023. They are located in Brno, Czech Republic, and are being managed by CEO David Varga. Fintokei provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with Purple Trading Seychelles as their broker.

Fintokei headquarters are located at Masarykova 409 26, 602 00 Brno – Město Brno, Czech Republic.

Who is the CEO of Fintokei?

David Varga is the CEO of Fintokei. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Funding Program Options

Fintokei provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Pro Trader
  • Start Trader
  • Swift Trader

Pro Trader

Fintokei Pro Trader provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from €10,000 up to €400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Pro Trader allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage while also being able to choose your account funding between USD, EUR, JPY, and CZK.

Account SizePrice
€10,000€99
€20,000€149
€50,000€299
€100,000€499
€200,000€999
€400,000€1,999

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Pro Trader Scaling Plan

Pro Trader also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to secure a 10% profit during at least two consecutive months, you will become eligible to scale your account balance to the following account size and, depending on the level, potentially increase your profit split.

Pro Trader Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.

Start Trader

Fintokei Start Trader provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from €20,000 up to €100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Start Trader allows you to trade with up to 1:25 leverage while also being able to choose your account funding between USD, EUR, JPY, and CZK.

Account SizePrice
€20,000€119
€50,000€244
€100,000€419

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 2% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 180 days to reach the profit target during phase one. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 3% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 180 days to reach the profit target during phase two. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 180 days to reach the profit target during phase three. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 50% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Start Trader Scaling Plan

Start Trader also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to secure a 10% profit during at least two consecutive months, you will become eligible to scale your account balance to the following account size.

Start Trader Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 2%, whereas Phase 2 is set at 3%, and Phase 3 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Maximum Trading Period – The maximum trading duration during which you must reach your required profit target and conclude your evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a maximum trading period of 180 days.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your first trading day should not exceed 40% of your total profits, and a maximum profit of 1% can be earned on trading day 1. (Only applies to all three Evaluation phases)

Swift Trader

Fintokei Swift Trader provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from €1,000 up to €50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Swift Trader allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage while also being able to choose your account funding between USD, EUR, JPY, and CZK.

Account SizePrice
€1,000€79
€2,000€119
€5,000€259
€10,000€519
€50,000€2,699

By purchasing the Swift Trader, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for your first payout. You must also respect the 10% maximum trailing loss rule. Your first payout is once you manage to secure a 10% profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Swift Trader Scaling Plan

Swift Trader also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to secure a 10% profit during at least two consecutive months, you will become eligible to scale your account balance to the following account size and, depending on the level, potentially increase your profit split.

Swift Trader Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the first payout is 10%. After the first payout, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 10%.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.

What Makes Fintokei Different From Other Prop Firms?

Fintokei differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, account sizes up to $400,000 (Pro Trader), low profit target requirements (Start Trader), affordable pricing (Start Trader), instant funding program (Swift Trader), no minimum trading day requirements (Swift Trader), profit split up to 95%, first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, and future bi-weekly withdrawals.

Fintokei’s Pro Trader is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Pro Trader also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Pro Trader stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, account sizes up to $400,000, profit split up to 95%, first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, and future bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between Fintokei & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Fintokei & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Fintokei & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Fintokei’s Start Trader is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 2% in phase one, 3% in phase two, and 6% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have a maximum trading day limitation of 180 days during each evaluation phase while being required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during each evaluation phase. The Start Trader also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Start Trader stands out mainly for having low profit target requirements, affordable pricing, first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, and future bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between Fintokei & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target2%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target3%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10%5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: 180 Days
Phase 2: 180 Days
Phase 3: 180 Days
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Fintokei & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target2%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target3%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: 180 Days
Phase 2: 180 Days
Phase 3: 180 Days
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50%80%

Example of comparison between Fintokei & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target2%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target3%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: 180 Days
Phase 2: 180 Days
Phase 3: 180 Days
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50%75% up to 95%

Fintokei’s Swift Trader is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target for your first withdrawal, with a 10% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Swift Trader also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Swift Trader stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, being an instant funding program, profit split up to 90%, and future bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between Fintokei & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiThe5ers
Profit Target10% (For First Withdrawal)10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 90%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Fintokei & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10% (For First Withdrawal)❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌6%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Fintokei & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesFintokeiFTUK
Profit Target10% (For First Withdrawal)❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 90%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, Fintokei differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, account sizes up to $400,000 (Pro Trader), low profit target requirements (Start Trader), affordable pricing (Start Trader), instant funding program (Swift Trader), no minimum trading day requirements (Swift Trader), profit split up to 95%, first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, and future bi-weekly withdrawals.

Is Getting Fintokei Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Pro Trader is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Start Trader is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (2% in phase one, 3% in phase two, and 6% in phase 3) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there is a maximum trading period of 180 days in each evaluation phase, with a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50%.
  • Receiving capital from the Swift Trader program is realistic primarily due to its average first withdrawal profit target of 10% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (10% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 90%.

After considering all the factors, Fintokei is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Fintokei is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in April 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Fintokei and reaching funded status with the Pro Trader, Start Trader, and Swift Trader, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95 based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Pro Trader, while the Start Trader will provide you with a generous profit split of 55% up to 90%. Lastly, Swift Trader will provide you with a generous profit split of 50%.

When it comes to Fintokei payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Fintokei is their website, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Fintokei Use?

Fintokei is partnered with Purple Trading Seychelles as their broker.

Purple Trading Seychelles aspires to be more than just a broker. Their objective is to provide favorable trading conditions and cutting-edge technologies and, most importantly, to establish a relationship where you view them as your equal partner. They firmly believe that this approach is the key to realizing success in the dynamic landscape of financial markets.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Fintokei, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, or cTrader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Fintokei is partnered with Purple Trading Seychelles, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, and indices with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program type that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
AUD/ZARCAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/HUFCHF/JPYCHF/ZAR
EUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZKEUR/GBPEUR/HUF
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDEUR/USDEUR/ZARGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDGBP/ZARNOK/SEK
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SEKNZD/SGDNZD/USD
SGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HUFUSD/ILS
USD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGD
USD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USDBRENT
CLNGAS

Indices

ASXCACDAXHK50BRENT.i
CL.iNIKKEINSDQSPSTOXX50
FTSEDOW

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX6 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES6 USD / LOT
INDICES6 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 4PurpleTradingSC-03Demo30043878q8B=k|TG7Click here
MetaTrader 5PurpleTradingSC-01MT55099677q8B=k|TG7Click here
cTraderClick here

Education

Fintokei provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as:

  • About Prop Trading
  • How To Trade
  • Inspiration
  • What’s New

Fintokei stands out as a distinctive proprietary trading firm by offering a free trial option. This gives traders the opportunity to familiarize themselves with the platform’s trading conditions, reducing the risk of mistakes when they choose one of the five available evaluation programs.

Lastly, Fintokei grants all clients entry to a trader dashboard meticulously crafted by professionals. This functionality simplifies risk management by providing continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, guaranteeing real-time updates.

Fintokei Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Fintokei has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotFintokei has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.5 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 366 reviews. Notably, 83% of these reviews have awarded Fintokei the highest rating of 5 stars.

In the first example, the client had a very pleasant experience with Fintokei. They found the trading conditions favorable and appreciated the fast procedures and credentials. The payout process was smooth, and any minor issues were quickly and professionally resolved. Overall, the client felt that Fintokei provided a stable and reliable service.

The second client also had a positive experience with Fintokei, describing their services as easy and efficient. They appreciated the immediate setup and the well-laid-out dashboard. The client also noted that customer support was fast and friendly. Having just become funded, they expressed optimism about building a lasting relationship with Fintokei, praising the service as first-class all around.

Social Media Statistics

Fintokei can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook22 Followers & 19 Likes
Twitter4,415 Followers
Instagram3,658 Followers
YouTube422 Subscribers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fintokei.com
Phone+420 321 338 152
Discord❌
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Czech, Japanese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Fintokei by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, currency, trading platform, and account size.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 10% discount on all Fintokei account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Fintokei is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the Pro Trader, which is a two-step evaluation, the Start Trader, which is a three-step evaluation, and the Swift Trader, which is an instant funding program.

Fintokei’s Pro Trader is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Pro Trader features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Fintokei’s Start Trader is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 2% in Phase One, 3% in Phase Two, and 6% in Phase Three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have a maximum 180-day requirement during each evaluation phase. Additionally, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Start Trader features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Fintokei’s Swift Trader is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 90% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for the first payout, with a 10% maximum trailing loss rule, which is a realistic trading objective. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Swift Trader features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Fintokei to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, account sizes up to $400,000 (Pro Trader), low profit target requirements (Start Trader), affordable pricing (Start Trader), instant funding program (Swift Trader), no minimum trading day requirements (Swift Trader), profit split up to 95%, first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, and future bi-weekly withdrawals. After considering everything Fintokei offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Fintokei was last updated on 04.02.2025 at 11:50 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Fintokei and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Fintokei review by commenting below!

The post Fintokei Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fintokei/feed/ 0
Blue Guardian (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blue-guardian/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=blue-guardian https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blue-guardian/#comments Wed, 03 Jun 2020 05:09:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=3265 Blue Guardian strives to assist proficient and seasoned traders in optimizing their skills to the fullest extent, ensuring the attainment of a funded account. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive 85% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial […]

The post Blue Guardian (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Blue Guardian strives to assist proficient and seasoned traders in optimizing their skills to the fullest extent, ensuring the attainment of a funded account. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive 85% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Blue Guardian?

Blue Guardian is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Iconic Exchange FZCO that was incorporated in September 2021. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by CEO Sean Baiton. Blue Guardia provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their brokers.

Blue Guardian headquarters are located at Dubai Silicon Oasis, DDP, Building A2, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.

Who is the CEO of Blue Guardian?

Sean Baiton is the CEO of Blue Guardian. He has years of trading expertise and experience in the field of prop firms. With a firsthand understanding of the proprietary trading firm industry, Sean offers an array of trading services, ranging from signal provision to the utilization of machine learning and quantitative analysis for the development of trading bots.

Guided by Sean’s leadership, Blue Guardian has crafted a robust strategy for both short and long-term goals. He plays a pivotal role in shaping and executing the company’s vision and mission, contributing significantly to its establishment and successful implementation.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Blue Guardian provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • 2-Step Standard Evaluation
  • 2-Step pro Evaluation
  • 1-Step Evaluation
  • Three-step Evaluation
  • Instant Funding

2-Step Standard Evaluation

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step Standard Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The 2-Step Standard Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$87
$25,000$187
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$947

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 85% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

2-Step Standard Evaluation Scaling Plan

The 2-Step Standard Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 12% over the three-month period or a 4% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 30% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $130,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $130,000 account increases to $160,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $160,000 account increases to $190,000.

And so on…

2-Step Standard Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days, where you must generate a minimum of 0.5% profit in each of the three days.

2-Step pro Evaluation

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step pro Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The 2-Step pro Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$140
$25,000$280
$50,000$400
$100,000$620
$200,000$1,200

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 85% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

2-Step pro Evaluation Scaling Plan

2-Step pro Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 12% over the three-month period or a 4% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 30% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $130,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $130,000 account increases to $160,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $160,000 account increases to $190,000.

And so on…

2-Step pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 4 days, where you must generate a minimum of 0.5% profit in each of the four days.

1-Step Evaluation

Blue Guardian’s 1-Step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The 1-Step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$947

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 85% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

1-Step Evaluation Scaling Plan

1-Step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 12% over the three-month period or a 4% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 30% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $130,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $130,000 account increases to $160,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $160,000 account increases to $190,000.

And so on…

1-Step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days, where you must generate a minimum of 0.5% profit in each of the three days.

Three-step Evaluation

Blue Guardian’s Three-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$67
$25,000$147
$50,000$227
$100,000$367
$200,000$667

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 85% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Three-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Three-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 12% over the three-month period or a 4% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 30% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $130,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $130,000 account increases to $160,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $160,000 account increases to $190,000.

And so on…

Three-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days, where you must generate a minimum of 0.5% profit in each of the three days.

Instant Funding

Blue Guardian’s Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$109
$10,000$149
$25,000$309
$50,000$479
$100,000$779

By purchasing Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal requirement of $100. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You can request a payout once you have completed the minimum requirement of five trading days and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 20% of total profits. If one day’s profit exceeds this limit, you must continue trading until the highest profit day falls below 20% of total profits before requesting a payout. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis with an 80% profit split.

Instant Funding Guardian Scaling Plan

Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 12% over the three-month period or a 4% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 30% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $130,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $130,000 account increases to $160,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $160,000 account increases to $190,000.

And so on…

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. Instant Funding have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. Instant Funding have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Instant Funding has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days, where you must generate a minimum of 0.5% profit in each of the five days.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 20% of total profits.

What Makes Blue Guardian Different From Other Prop Firms?

Blue Guardian differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step Standard Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The 2-Step Standard Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the 2-Step Standard Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFunded Trading Plus (Premium)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%4%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80%

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step pro Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The 2-Step pro Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the 2-Step pro Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFundedNext (Two-step Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80%

Blue Guardian’s 1-Step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in the evaluation phase. The 1-Step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the 1-Step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split85%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing) (Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split85%80% up to 92.75%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFXIFY
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split85%75% up to 90%

Blue Guardian’s Three-step Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each of the three evaluation phases. The Three-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, balance-based drawdown, weekly withdrawals, and affordable evaluation fees.

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss8%6% (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split85%80%

Blue Guardian’s Instant Funding is is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are $100 of withdrawal requirements with 3% maximum daily loss rule and 6% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days and meet consistency rule requirement. The Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly withdrawals, and affordable evaluation fees.

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%6%
Maximum Loss6% (trailing)6% (trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianHola Prime
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss6% (trailing)5% (trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% (90% with Add-on)

Example of comparison between Blue Guardian & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesBlue GuardianThe5ers
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6% (trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 100%

Blue Guardian differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, three-step evaluation and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Is Getting Blue Guardian Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the 2-Step Standard Evaluatio is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 85%.
  • Receiving capital from the 2-Step pro Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 4 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 85%.
  • Receiving capital from the 1-Step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 85%.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase 3) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 85%.
  • Receiving capital from the Instant Funding is realistic primarily realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts with 80% profit split while meeting the consistency score.

After considering all the factors, Blue Guardian is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Blue Guardian is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in September 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Blue Guardian and reaching funded status with the 2-Step Standard Evaluation, 2-Step pro Evaluation, 1-Step Evaluation, Three-step Evaluation, or Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 85% (80% on Instant Funding) based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account. It’s also worth noting that Instant Funding has a consistency rule.

When it comes to Blue Guardian payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Blue Guardian is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Blue Guardian Use?

Blue Guardian is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Blue Guardian, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, Match-Trader, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Blue Guardian is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPY
CHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CNHAUD/NZDCAD/SGD
ERU/HUFEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEKEUR/TRYGBP/NZD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SGDNZD/USDSGD/JPY
USD/CNHUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLN
USD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/AUDXAU/CNHXAU/EURXAU/GBP
XAU/SGDXAU/USDXPT/USDUKBRENTUSWTI

Indices

AU200DJ30FR40GER30JP225
NAS100SP500STOXX50UK100CHINAH
HK50NETH25USDIndexVIXIndex

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDDOT/USDEOS/USD
ETH/USDLNK/USDLTC/USDXLM/USDXRP/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentsCommission Fee
FOREX 0 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 0 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5Click here
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here

Education

Blue Guardian provides its community with a detailed Blog with valuable educational articles.

Additonally, Blue Guardian provides a trading dashboard that enables traders to monitor their statistics not only during evaluation phases but also after securing a funded status in their trading endeavors.

Trustpilot Feedback

Blue Guardian has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Blue Guardian has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.2 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 959 reviews. Notably, 80% of these reviews have awarded Blue Guardian the highest rating of 5 stars.

In the first comment, Blue Guardian is praised as the best prop firm with excellent customer service that effectively resolves issues, stress-free and fast payouts, and reliable brokers with the lowest spreads. The client encourages fellow prop traders not to miss the opportunity of working with Blue Guardian.

The client expresses genuine satisfaction with Blue Guardian’s services, highlighting their positive experience with customer support, trading conditions, and fast payouts. They consider it worth the investment and encourage others to open an account with Blue Guardian.

Social Media Statistics

Blue Guardian can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

LinkedIn323 Followers
Twitter54,900 Followers
Instagram26,100 Followers
YouTube7,400 Subscribers
Discord76,601 Members
Telegram4,415 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@blueguardian.com
Phone❌
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Blue Guardian by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account –  Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, and your broker.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 10% discount on all Blue Guardian account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Blue Guardian is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the 2-Step Standard Evaluation and 2-Step pro Evaluation, which are two-step evaluations, the 1-Step Evaluation, which is a one-step evaluation, the Three-step Evaluation, which is a three-step evaluation, and the Instant Funding, which is direct funding program.

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step Standard Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 85% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the 2-Step Standard Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blue Guardian’s 2-Step pro Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 85% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the 2-Step pro Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blue Guardian’s 1-Step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 85% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the 1-Step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blue Guardian’s Three-step Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 85% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Three-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blue Guardian’s Instant Funding is a direct funding program that hat allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Blue Guardian to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high 85% starting profit split, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts. After considering everything Blue Guardian has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Blue Guardian was last updated on 25.05.2025 at 14:40 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Blue Guardian and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Blue Guardian review by commenting below!

The post Blue Guardian (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blue-guardian/feed/ 2
SeacrestFunded Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/seacrestfunded/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=seacrestfunded https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/seacrestfunded/#respond Fri, 10 Apr 2020 19:02:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=24282 SeacrestFunded presents traders with challenge programs designed to offer them a chance to engage in trading without exposing their personal capital to risk. Successful traders are rewarded with a payment based on their profits. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up […]

The post SeacrestFunded Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

SeacrestFunded presents traders with challenge programs designed to offer them a chance to engage in trading without exposing their personal capital to risk. Successful traders are rewarded with a payment based on their profits. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 92.75% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are SeacrestFunded?

SeacrestFunded is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name MyFunded Solutions, LLC, which was incorporated in June 2022. They are located in Dallas, Texas, and are being managed by CEO Matthew Leech. SeacrestFunded provides traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation while being partnered with Purple Trading Seychelles, Match-Trader and Seacrest Markets as their brokers.

SeacrestFunded headquarters are located at 100 Crescent Court Suite 700 Dallas, TX 75201, United States.

Who is the CEO of SeacrestFunded?

Matthew Leech is the founder of SeacrestFunded, who is a prosperous entrepreneur in the financial and tech services sectors, as well as a skilled trader in forex, options, stocks, and cryptocurrencies. Since 2018, he has been actively involved in trading and currently holds the position of CEO in SeacrestFunded, along with several other ventures.

Matt’s motivation for launching SeacrestFunded stemmed from recognizing a gap in the industry. Often, proprietary trading firms prioritize developing programs that neglect the needs of individual traders. However, with SeacrestFunded, the primary focus is on educating traders and facilitating their path to securing funding. Matt and the entire team are deeply committed to this objective, consistently strengthening the foundational skills required to become a funded trader.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

SeacrestFunded provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • Two-step Max Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge

Two-step Challenge

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$100
$25,000$200
$50,000$300
$100,000$500

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 92.75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 12% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 8%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 3-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)

Two-step Max Challenge

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Max Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Max Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$38
$10,000$75
$25,000$140
$50,000$210
$100,000$425

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 92.75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Max Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Max Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 12% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-step Max Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5% in phase one and 4% in phase two and once funded. (Scaleable up to 8%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10% in phase one and 8% in phase two and once funded. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 3-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)

VIP Program Two-step Challenge & Two-step Max Challenge

One-step Challenge

SeacrestFunded`s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$100
$25,000$200
$50,000$300
$100,000$500

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 92.75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 12% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%. (Scaleable up to 6%)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6% (Scaleable up to 12%). After reaching a profit of 6% based on your initial account size, the maximum trailing loss limit is set at the starting account balance, meaning that if you are managing a $100,000 account, your drawdown will be set at $100,000. Going below that mark will result in a breach.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 3-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)

VIP Program (One-step Challenge)

Three-step Challenge

SeacrestFunded`s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$70
$25,000$150
$50,000$225
$100,000$375

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 5 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a 5-day basis. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Three-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 12% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all three evaluation phases is 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.

What Makes SeacrestFunded Different From Other Prop Firms?

SeacrestFunded differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except Three-step Challenge), first withdrawal after only 7 days, 5 days, or even on-demand, and weekly, 5-day, or on-demand future payouts, depending on the challenge.

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% during each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having a drawdown scaling feature, an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days, and weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 8%)4%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedBlue Guardian (Unlimited)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 8%)4%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%85%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 8%)5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%80% up to 95%

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Max Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules in phase one and 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules in phase two and once funded. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% during each evaluation phase. The Two-step Max Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Max Challenge stands out mainly for having a drawdown scaling feature, an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days, and weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% in Phase 1
4% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 8%)
5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10% in Phase 1
8% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 14%)
10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% in Phase 1
4% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 8%)
5%
Maximum Loss10% in Phase 1
8% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 14%)
10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedFundedNext (Two-step Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% in Phase 1
4% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 8%)
5%
Maximum Loss10% in Phase 1
8% in Phase 2 & Once Funded
(Scaleable up to 14%)
10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%80% up to 95%

SeacrestFunded`s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days, where each has to consist of a minimum profit of 0.5% during the evaluation phase. The One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having a drawdown scaling feature, an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days, and weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFunded Funded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedPipFarm (Trailing)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)3%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)12% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 92.75%75% up to 95%

SeacrestFunded`s Three-step Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6%, with a 4% maximum daily and an 8% maximum loss rule during all three evaluation phases. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Three-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, first withdrawal after only 5 calendar days, and future payouts on a 5 day basis.

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between SeacrestFunded & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesSeacrestFundedRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

In conclusion, SeacrestFunded differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except Three-step Challenge), first withdrawal after only 7 days, 5 days, or even on-demand, and weekly, 5-day, or on-demand future payouts, depending on the challenge.

Is Getting SeacrestFunded Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily, scaleable up to 8% and 8% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in both evaluation phases. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 92.75%.
  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Max Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss in phase one and 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss in phase two and once funded). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in both evaluation phases. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 92.75%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily, scaleable up to 6% and 6% maximum trailing loss, scaleable up to 12%). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in the evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 92.75%.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in all three evaluation phases) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, SeacrestFunded is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

SeacrestFunded is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in June 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with SeacrestFunded and reaching funded status with the Two-step Challenge, Two-step Max Challenge, or One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 92.75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

And lastly, while working with SeacrestFunded and reaching funded status with the Three-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after only 5 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 5 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to SeacrestFunded payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof of SeacrestFunded is their Discord and YouTube channels, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does SeacrestFunded Use?

SeacrestFunded is partnered with Purple Trading Seychelle, Match-Trader and Seacrest Markets as their broker.

Purple Trading Seychelles aspires to be more than just a broker. Their objective is to provide favorable trading conditions and cutting-edge technologies and, most importantly, to establish a relationship where you view them as your equal partner. They firmly believe that this approach is the key to realizing success in the dynamic landscape of financial markets. Learn more about Purple Trading Seychelles by reading our in-depth Review.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with SeacrestFunded, they allow you to trade on cTrader if you choose Purple Trading Seychelles, TradingView if you choose Match-Trader and MetaTrader 5 if you choose Seacrest Markets. Additionally, traders are also provided with an option to choose Match-Trader.

Trading instruments

As mentioned above, SeacrestFunded is partnered with Purple Trading Seychelles, Match-Trader and Seacrest Markets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Purple Trading Seychelles Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPY
CHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CNHAUD/NZDCAD/SGD
ERU/HUFEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEKEUR/TRYGBP/NZD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SGDNZD/USDSGD/JPY
USD/CNHUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLN
USD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Purple Trading Seychelles Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/AUDXAU/CNHXAU/EURXAU/GBP
XAU/SGDXAU/USDXPT/USDUKBRENTUSWTI

Purple Trading Seychelles Indices

AU200DJ30FR40GER30JP225
NAS100SP500STOXX50UK100CHINAH
HK50NETH25USDIndexVIXIndex

Purple Trading Seychelles Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDDOT/USDEOS/USD
ETH/USDLNK/USDLTC/USDXLM/USDXRP/USD

Quality FX Forex Pairs

EUR/CADCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/HUFUSD/BRL
USD/CNHUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/TRYUSD/ZAREUR/CZK
EUR/PLNEUR/ZARGBP/ZAREUR/TRY

Quality FX Commodities

XAU/USDXAU/EURXAG/USDWTIBRENT

Quality FX Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40UK100
JPN225NAS100SPX500US30CHINA50
HK50SPAIN35USDINDEXVIXUS2000
TAIEX

Quality FX Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 7 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
cTraderClick here
Match-TraderClick here
MetaTrader 5Click here

Education

SeacrestFunded provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following 16 categories:

  • Technical Analysis
  • Trading Indicators
  • Psychology
  • Algorithms
  • Scalping
  • Technology
  • Risk Management
  • Market Analysis
  • Strategies
  • Broker
  • Diversification
  • Volatility
  • Leverage
  • Financial Education
  • Entrepreneurship
  • Analysis

Additionally, we can also find a Success Stories section, which includes educational interviews with the most successful traders who are working with SeacrestFunded.

Lastly, SeacrestFunded provides all clients access to a well-developed trader dashboard. This feature improves risk management by offering continuous access to detailed statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates every minute throughout the day. This enhancement significantly contributes to an overall enhanced user experience.

SeacrestFunded Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

SeacrestFunded has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, SeacrestFunded has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,400 reviews. Notably, 81% of these reviews have awarded SeacrestFunded the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment mentions the client having a positive experience with SeacrestFunded`s customer service. They sought assistance through the webchat feature, where an agent promptly and efficiently resolved their query within seconds. The commenter commends Jae for being super polite, friendly, and helpful, expressing genuine appreciation for the swift and effective assistance.

SeacrestFunded has become a focal point for many traders, including this client, due to its notable transparency. The absence of hidden fees and rules, coupled with fast payments, exceptional customer service, and the availability of affordable evaluation accounts, contributes to its appeal in the trading community.

Social Media Statistics

SeacrestFunded can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter143,300 Followers
Discord123,055 Members
YouTube31,500 Subscribers
Telegram7,785 Members
Instagram62,500 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@myfundedfx.com
Phone❌
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with SeacrestFunded by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, broker, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 10% discount on all SeacrestFunded account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, cryptocurrency, and PayPal payment methods.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from SeacrestFunded, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, SeacrestFunded is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: the Two-step Challenge and Two-step Max Challenge, which are a two-step evaluations, the One-step Challenge, which is a one-step evaluations, and the Three-step Challenge, which is a three-step evaluation.

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 92.75% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

SeacrestFunded`s Two-step Max Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 92.75% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow in phase one and a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow in phase 2 and once funded. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Max Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

SeacrestFunded`s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 92.75% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

SeacrestFunded`s Three-step Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a 6% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Three-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend SeacrestFunded to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, first withdrawal after only 7 or 14 calendar days, and weekly or bi-weekly future payouts, depending on the challenge. After considering everything SeacrestFunded has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of SeacrestFunded was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:30 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on SeacrestFundedand the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed SeacrestFundedreview by commenting below!

The post SeacrestFunded Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/seacrestfunded/feed/ 0
Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=forex-prop-firm https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/#respond Wed, 25 Mar 2020 12:54:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=30822 Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the intention of providing its traders with a comfortable trading environment. That is why they have developed 14 unique funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. […]

The post Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the intention of providing its traders with a comfortable trading environment. That is why they have developed 14 unique funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Forex Prop Firm?

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Prosperity Technology LLC that was incorporated in January 2022. They are located in the United States of America and are being managed by CEO Jonathan Dufresne. Forex Prop Firm provides traders with the opportunity to choose between 14 account types, four two-step evaluations, four one-step evaluations, three three-step evaluations, and three instant funding programs while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

Forex Prop Firm’s headquarters are located at 1942 Broadway, Suite 314C, Boulder, CO, 80302, US.

Who is the CEO of Forex Prop Firm?

Jonathan Dufresne is the CEO of Forex Prop Firm. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Forex Prop Firm provides its traders with 14 unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • Two-step Pro Challenge
  • Two-step Bear Challenge
  • Two-step Bull Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • One-step Pro Challenge
  • One-step Bear Challenge
  • One-step Bull Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge
  • Three-step Bear Challenge
  • Three-step Bull Challenge
  • Pro Instant Funding
  • Advanced Instant Funding
  • Premium Instant Funding

Two-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$85
$10,000$124
$25,000$249
$50,000$389
$100,000$679
$200,000$1,239
$400,000$2,399

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 12% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 35 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase one. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 12% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 60 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase two. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 3% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5% once funded, while evaluation accounts have no maximum daily loss rule.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 12% during the evaluation and a maximum loss of 10% once funded.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • Maximum Trading Period – The maximum trading duration during which you must reach your required profit target and conclude your evaluation phase. The evaluation has a maximum trading period of 35 calendar days for phase one and 60 calendar days for phase two.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Pro Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$71
$10,000$94
$25,000$209
$50,000$319
$100,000$549
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Pro Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bear Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$99
$10,000$179
$25,000$299
$50,000$449
$100,000$799
$200,000$1,400
$400,000$2,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 7% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 7% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 7%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bull Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$99
$10,000$179
$25,000$299
$50,000$449
$100,000$799
$200,000$1,400
$400,000$2,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 12%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$71
$10,000$94
$25,000$209
$50,000$319
$100,000$549
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,899

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Pro Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$69
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$949
$400,000$1,799

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 20% while not surpassing their 6% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 20% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 6% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Pro Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 20%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 6%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bear Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$114
$10,000$189
$25,000$319
$50,000$479
$100,000$849
$200,000$1,469
$400,000$2,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 6%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bull Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$114
$10,000$189
$25,000$319
$50,000$479
$100,000$849
$200,000$1,469
$400,000$2,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$259
$100,000$419
$200,000$769
$400,000$1,549

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 7% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is 6% while Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 7%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bear Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$89
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$399
$100,000$699
$200,000$1,299
$400,000$2,499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 7% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 7% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 2 is 7% while Phase 1 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3% during Phase 1, Phase 2, and once funded while having a maximum loss of 4% during Phase 3.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bull Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$89
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$399
$100,000$699
$200,000$1,299
$400,000$2,499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 2 is 12% while Phase 1 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 10%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5% during Phase 1, Phase 2, and once funded while having a maximum loss of 6% during Phase 3.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Pro Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Pro Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Pro Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$200
$25,000$450
$50,000$850
$100,000$1,600
$200,000$3,000
$400,000$5,000

By purchasing Pro Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 35% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Pro Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Pro Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Advanced Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Advanced Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Advanced Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$300
$25,000$700
$50,000$1,300
$100,000$2,500
$200,000$4,800
$400,000$8,800

By purchasing Advanced Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 65% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Advanced Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Advanced Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Premium Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Premium Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Premium Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$400
$25,000$1,000
$50,000$1,700
$100,000$3,200
$200,000$5,800
$400,000$10,500

By purchasing Premium Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Premium Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Premium Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Scaling Plan

All 14 funding programs of Forex Prop Firm have a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will be required to forfeit your profits.

Payment Proof

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in January 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Forex Prop Firm and reaching funded status with any of their 14 funding programs, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 2% or 3% withdrawal target every 14 calendar days, depending on the funding program type. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Forex Prop Firm and reaching funded status with the Pro Instant Funding, Advanced Instant Funding, or Premium Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and a minimum profit of 3%. Your profit split will consist of a generous 35% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Pro Instant Funding program, 65% up to 100% on your Advanced Instant Funding program, and 95% up to 100% on your Premium Instant Funding program.

When it comes to Forex Prop Firm payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Forex Prop Firm is their Discord, Telegram, and YouTube channels, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Forex Prop Firm Use?

Forex Prop Firm sets itself apart by not partnering with the typical, well-known broker brands. Instead, they have formed a strategic alliance with a top-tier liquidity provider, ensuring that traders experience the best possible simulated real-market conditions. This partnership offers a high level of reliability, transparency, and efficiency, allowing clients to trade with confidence in a realistic market environment.

When it comes to trading platforms, Forex Prop Firm stands out by providing access to Match-Trader, allowing clients to gain access to a range of tools and features that enhance their trading capabilities, allowing for precise execution, superior analytics, and smooth navigation throughout their trading journey.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Forex Prop Firm is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPY
CHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDEUR/HUF
EUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/TRYGBP/NZDNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/JPYSGD/JPYUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUF
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZARUSD/THBUSD/BRLZAR/JPYMXN/JPYNOK/JPY
CNH/JPYEUR/SGDGBP/SGDNZD/SGDEUR/HKDUSD/CNH
AUD/CNH

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPT/USDXZT/USDXNI/USD
XAU/JPYXAU/EURXAU/AUDXAU/GBPXPD/USD
XAG/EURXAG/JPYUKO/USDUSO/USD

Indices

ASX200EUSTX50FRA40GER30NDX100
UK100US30SPX500JPN225HK50
VIXUS2000USDXSWI20NTH25
CAN60

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USD
XLM/USDADA/USDTRX/USDAVAX/USDBNB/USD
DOGE/USDDOT/USDFIL/USDICP/USDLINK/USD
MATIC/USDSOL/USDUNI/USDVET/USDSHIB/USD
XMR/USDEOS/USDAAVE/USDALGO/USDATOM/USD
AXS/USDCAKE/USDEGLD/USDFLOW/USDGRT/USD
IOTA/USDMKR/USDNEO/USDRUNE/USDSTX/USD
THETA/USDXTZ/USDMANA/USDARB/USDETC/USD
IMX/USDINJ/USDDSH/USDALCX/USD1INCH/USD
ALPHA/USDAR/USDAUDIO/USDBADGER/USDBAL/USD
BAND/USDBAT/USDBNT/USDCHR/USDCLV/USD
CREAM/USDCRV/USDDENT/USDDODO/USDENJ/USD
FIDA/USDFLM/USDFTM/USDHBAR/USDICX/USD
KNC/USDLINA/USDLRC/USDMTL/USDNEAR/USD
OMG/USDONT/USDPAXG/USDPERP/USDPROM/USD
PUNDIX/USDQTUM/USDRAY/USDREEF/USDREN/USD
SAND/USDSNX/USDSTMX/USDSTORJ/USDSXP/USD
WAVES/USDXEM/USDZIL/USDZRX/USDCHZ/USD
COMP/USDHOT/USDKSM/USDSUSHI/USDZEC/USD
APT/USDLDO/USDAPE/USDQNT/USDAGIX/USD
GALA/USDRNDR/USDFET/USDBLUR/USDCFX/USD
FXS/USDGNO/USDKLAY/USDLUNC/USDMINA/USD
OSMO/USDPEPE/USDROSE/USDSUI/USDXEC/USD
WBTC/USDGMX/USDBTTC/USDTWT/USDNEXO/USD
ASTR/USDMASK/USDCVX/USDTFUEL/USDCELO/USD
ENS/USDDYDX/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4.5 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 4.5 USD / LOT
INDICES 0.45 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 4.5 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertestemaildemo@FPF.com97#~COtHgWClick here

Education

Forex Prop Firm offers its community a comprehensive and informative Blog section, featuring a wide range of educational content designed to help traders enhance their skills and knowledge. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced trader, the blog provides valuable insights, strategies, and updates to keep you informed about the latest trends in the forex market.

In addition, Forex Prop Firm provides all clients with access to an intuitive and well-structured dashboard. This user-friendly tool streamlines risk management by bringing together key trading objectives, performance metrics, and statistics in one centralized location.

Trustpilot Feedback

Forex Prop Firm has gathered an average score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Forex Prop Firm has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 3.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 995 reviews. Notably, 65% of these reviews have awarded Forex Prop Firm the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client is satisfied with Forex Prop Firm, considering it a great Forex funding company. They highlight the swift provision of login credentials within 48 hours after passing the two-step evaluation. The client appreciates the unique practice of allowing an immediate agreement signing upon purchasing the challenge and receiving a certificate upon successfully passing the challenge. Overall, they express no regrets about working with this prop firm.

The client praises Forex Prop Firm as an amazing prop firm, emphasizing their timely and helpful responses to questions, making the process straightforward. Upon passing, they commend the quick outreach and prompt establishment of the live account, expressing love for the company.

Social Media Statistics

Forex Prop Firm can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram50,100 Followers
Twitter11,800 Followers
YouTube16,300 Subscribers
Telegram2,756 Members
Discord19,844 Members
Tik Tok183 Followers & 22 Likes

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@forexpropfirm.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Forex Prop Firm by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 50% discount on all Forex Prop Firm account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, Snappay, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Forex Prop Firm is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between 14 funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, Two-step Pro Challenge, Two-step Bear Challenge, and Two-step Bull Challenge, which are two-step evaluations, the One-step Challenge, One-step Pro Challenge, One-step Bear Challenge, and One-step Bull Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, the Three-step Challenge, Three-step Bear Challenge, and Three-step Bull Challenge, which are three-step evaluations, and Pro Instant Funding, Advanced Instant Funding, and Premium Instant Funding, which are direct funding programs.

I would recommend Forex Prop Firm to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, enormous flexibility with 14 unique funding program types, three unique Instant Funding programs, numerous add-on features, bi-weekly withdrawals (weekly with add-on), a profit split of up to 100%, and a 10% profit share from demo phases (except Instant Funding). After considering everything Forex Prop Firm offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Forex Prop Firm was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 12:10 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Forex Prop Firm and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Forex Prop Firm review by commenting below!

The post Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/feed/ 0
The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-funded-trader-program https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/#comments Sun, 24 Feb 2019 20:11:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=2219 The Funded Trader is searching for passionate and experienced traders who will succeed with their funds’ help by showing skills in unpredictable market conditions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading […]

The post The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

The Funded Trader is searching for passionate and experienced traders who will succeed with their funds’ help by showing skills in unpredictable market conditions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are The Funded Trader?

The Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name The Funded Trader LLC that was incorporated on the 12th of May, 2021. They are located in Liberty Hill, Texas, and are being managed by CEO Angelo Ciaramello. The Funded Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation, while being partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD as their brokers.

The Funded Trader headquarters are located at 14001 W HWY 29, Suite 102, Liberty Hill, TX 78642.

Who is the CEO of The Funded Trader?

Angelo Ciaramello is a 29-year-old entrepreneur from New Jersey that has founded The Funded Trader back in 2020. His company started as a startup that gamified capital markets retail trading. The goal was to provide an opportunity for individual traders who would compete to get funded and make the top spot on the rankings leaderboard.

Angelo and his team managed to develop multiple funding challenges that provide individuals with the opportunity to trade the company’s capital and receive percentage-based profit splits. One of his greater achievements in life was that he was recognized as one of the top 25 Financial Technology Leaders of New Jersey for the year 2022.

Anyone interested in following Angelo Ciaramello can do so by following his Instagram and LinkedIn. This way, you will be able to see more of his posts and what he’s up to on a daily basis.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

The Funded Trader provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Royal Pro Challenge
  • Royal Challenge
  • Knight Pro Challenge
  • Knight Challenge
  • Dragon Challenge

Royal Pro Challenge

The Funded Trader Royal Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $25,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Royal Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$25,000$239
$50,000$470
$100,000$949
$200,000$1,890

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two. You must also follow the 3% daily cap rule in Phase 1. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five profitable trading days in order to proceed to a funded account. You must also follow the 1,5% daily cap rule in Phase 2. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 3 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted also in 3 calendar days. Your profit split will be 75% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You must also follow the 2% daily cap rule in Funded stage. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge

  1. 85% profit split or 95% profit split

Royal Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Royal Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader make an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Royal Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 1 days.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.

Royal Challenge

The Funded Trader Royal Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Royal Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$60
$10,000$120
$25,000$189
$50,000$289
$100,000$489
$200,000$1,158

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 92.75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge

  1. First Withdrawal After 14 Calendar Days

Royal Challenge Scaling Plan

The Royal Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with If a trader make an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 92.75%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Royal Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 5 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where you must make a profit of 0.1% per day.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

Knight Pro Challenge

The Funded Trader Knight Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Knight Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$105
$25,000$195
$50,000$295
$100,000$495
$200,000$945

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is on-demand from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Knight Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Knight Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 10% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Knight Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where you must make a profit of 0.25% per day.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 50% of your total profits. (Only applies to Funded Status)

Knight Challenge

The Funded Trader Knight Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Knight Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$189
$50,000$289
$100,000$489
$200,000$939

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge

  1. Additional Drawdown (4% Maximum Daily Loss & 7% Maximum Trailing Loss)

Knight Challenge Scaling Plan

The Knight Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 5%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 8% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Knight Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (4% with Add-on or after scaling for the first time)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%. (7% with Add-on)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

Dragon Challenge

The Funded Trader Dragon Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Dragon Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$49
$10,000$99
$25,000$135
$50,000$205
$100,000$355

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that you are able to scale your maximum daily drawdown up to 6% and maximum drawdown up to 12%.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge

  1. 95% Profit Split

Dragon Challenge Scaling Plan

The Dragon Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Dragon Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 7%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%. (Scaleable up to 12%)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close. (Swing Dragon Challenge can hold trades during the weekend)
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

What Makes The Funded Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

The Funded Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, an unlimited trading period, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge.

The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Profitable Trading days in each evaluation phase. The Royal Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. You must also follow the daily cap rule in both evaluation phases and in funded stage. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Royal Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, allowing Expert Advisors, and 3 days withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FTMO

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)FTMO
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)Smart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)FXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%75% up to 92.75%

The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Royal Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Royal Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, allowing Expert Advisors, and bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)E8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)Funding pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%75% up to60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)FXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%75% up to 90%

The Funded Trader’s Knight Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase. The Knight Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Knight Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an above-average daily drawdown and maximum drawdown, and on-demand payouts.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFunding Pips
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%  (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Knight Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Knight Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a daily drawdown and maximum drawdown add-on, and weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)3%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 92.75%

The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Dragon Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Dragon Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, balance-based drawdown, weekly withdrawals, and affordable evaluation fees.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 12%)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 6%)❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 12%)5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%50% up to 100%

In conclusion, The Funded Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, unlimited trading periods, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge.

Is Getting The Funded Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Royal Challenge Pro is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum Profitable trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. You have also follow the daily cap rule in both evolutions phases and funded stage. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Royal Challenge is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 92.75%.
  • Receiving capital from the Knight Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with above-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in the evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Knight Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Dragon Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase 3) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 95%.

After considering all the factors, The Funded Trader is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

The Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 12th of May, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Royal Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 30 calendar days (14 calendar days with Add-on). However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous will consist of a generous 75% up to 92.75% based on the profit that you have generated on your Royal Challenge. However, the first three payouts cannot be more than 5%.

While working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Royal Pro Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 3 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 3 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous will consist of a generous 75% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your Royal Pro Challenge.

However, while working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Knight or Dragon Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after only 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Knight Challenge, while the Dragon Challenge will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 95%.

And lastly, while working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Knight Pro Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on-demand by meeting the consistency criteria. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size on an on-demand basis if the consistency criteria is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Knight Pro Challenge.

When it comes to The Funded Trader payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof of The Funded Trader is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does The Funded Trader Use?

The Funded Trader is partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with The Funded Trader, they allow you to trade on cTrader if you choose Voyage Markets, on MetaTrader 5 if you choose Thaurus LTD, and on Match-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, The Funded Trader is partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Voyage Markets Forex Pairs

CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SGD
GBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USD
USD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/ZAREUR/HUFUSD/MXN
USD/ZAREUR/PLNUSD/TRYEUR/TRY

Voyage Markets Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDWTIBRENT

Voyage Markets Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40JPN225
NAS100SPX500UK100US30

Voyage Markets Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDBCH/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Thaurus LTD Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/TRYEUR/USD
GBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZARUSD/PLNUSD/HUF

Thaurus LTD Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDBRENTCL

Thaurus LTD Indices

ASXDAXDOWFTSENIKKEI
NSDQSPSTOXX50

Thaurus LTD Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES1 USD / LOT (0 USD / LOT on Oil)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5Click here
cTraderClick here
Match-TraderClick here

Education

The Funded Trader provides its community with a detailed Media section with educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • Community Update – Latest news and updates
  • Company Announcements – Latest announcements regarding TFT
  • FAQ – Video form of frequently asked questions
  • Podcasts – Educational podcasts with successful traders
  • Spanish FAQ – Video form of frequently asked questions in the Spanish language
  • Trader Interviews – TFT Trader interviews

Additionally, we can also find a detailed Blog within the Media section, which includes educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • Trader Interviews – TFT Trader interviews
  • Trading Psychology – Educational trading psychology content
  • Trading Systems – Educational content for beginners
  • Trading Tips – Educational articles about trading suggestions, guides, and essential aspects of trading
  • Company Updates – Latest announcements of company updates
  • Industry News – Educational articles on the prop industry changes

The Funded Trader stands out as an exclusive proprietary trading company that provides a complimentary trial option. This enables traders to familiarize themselves with and adjust to the platform’s trading conditions, reducing the chances of errors when they eventually choose one of the five evaluation programs offered.

And lastly, The Funded Trader also provides all clients access to a professionally designed trader dashboard. This feature streamlines risk management by offering constant access to detailed statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates every minute of the day. This enhancement contributes to an overall improved user experience.

The Funded Trader Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

The Funded Trader has gathered an average score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotThe Funded Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an average rating of 3.2 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 21,083 reviews. Notably, 67% of these reviews have awarded The Funded Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us The Funded Trader receiving positive acclaim as a reputable company, with a community member expressing satisfaction and a trouble-free experience. The client appreciates the consistent availability of promotions, rewards, discounts, and prizes, expressing the hope that this favorable aspect will be maintained at its current level.

Additionally, The Funded Trader is highly praised as an exceptional proprietary trading firm, often regarded as the best in the industry. The client highlights its standout features, including low commissions, tight spreads, prompt support, fast payouts, and numerous other positive attributes. They express a strong recommendation for TFT to anyone seeking to trade with a prop firm.

Social Media Statistics

The Funded Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook21,000 Followers & 15,000 Likes
Instagram125,000 Followers
Telegram19,178 Members
Discord106,016 Members
YouTube102,000 Subscribers
Twitter99,200 Followers
Reddit5,500 Members
TikTok48,800 Followers & 455,100 Likes

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@thefundedtraderprogram.com
Phone(888) 920-3079
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, French, Portuguese, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with The Funded Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your challenge type, account size, trading platform, broker, account type, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code forexpropreviews and enjoy a 10% discount on all The Funded Trader challenge types.
  • Choose Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and cryptocurrency payment method after you have successfully applied our discount code.

Conclusion

In conclusion, The Funded Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Royal Pro Challenges and Royal Challenges, which are a two-step evaluation, the Knight Pro Challenge and Knight Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, and the Dragon Challenge, which is a three-step evaluation.

The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 5 Profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Royal Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance

The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 92.75% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Royal Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Knight Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Knight Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Knight Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Dragon Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend The Funded Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, unlimited trading periods, 3 days, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge. After considering everything The Funded Trader has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of The Funded Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:09 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on The Funded Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed The Funded Trader review by commenting below!

The post The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/feed/ 22